testing 500 pages

820
Last printed 9/21/2004 08:25:00 AM Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing (Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Upload: guru99

Post on 14-Jun-2015

258 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Testing 500 pages

Last printed 9/21/2004 08:25:00 AM

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

Page 2: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

1. Introduction 3

2. Principle 4

3. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

5. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

6. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

7. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

8. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

9. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

10. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

I. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

I. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

II. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

2

Page 3: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

3

Page 4: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

4

Page 5: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

5

Page 6: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

6

Page 7: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

7

Page 8: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

8

Page 9: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

1. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

2. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

3. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

9

Page 10: Testing 500 pages

4. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

5. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

6. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

10

Page 11: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

11

Page 12: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

12

Page 13: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

3. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

13

Page 14: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

14

Page 15: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

15

Page 16: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

16

Page 17: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

17

Page 18: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

18

Page 19: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

19

Page 20: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

20

Page 21: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

21

Page 22: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

22

Page 23: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

23

Page 24: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

24

Page 25: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

25

Page 26: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

26

Page 27: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

27

Page 28: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

28

MIC (g/ml)

Page 29: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

1. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

2. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

3. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

4. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

29

Page 30: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

1. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

2. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

30

Page 31: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

31

Page 32: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

32

Page 33: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

33

Page 34: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

34

Page 35: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

35

Page 36: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

36

Page 37: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

37

Page 38: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

38

Page 39: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

39

Page 40: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

40

Page 41: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

41

Page 42: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

42

Page 43: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

43

Page 44: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

44

Page 45: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

45

Page 46: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

a. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

b. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

c. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

d. These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial agents

that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

e. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

46

Page 47: Testing 500 pages

f. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

g. Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

47

Page 48: Testing 500 pages

48

Page 49: Testing 500 pages

49

Page 50: Testing 500 pages

50

Page 51: Testing 500 pages

51

Page 52: Testing 500 pages

52

Page 53: Testing 500 pages

53

Page 54: Testing 500 pages

54

Page 55: Testing 500 pages

55

Page 56: Testing 500 pages

56

Page 57: Testing 500 pages

57

Page 58: Testing 500 pages

58

Page 59: Testing 500 pages

59

Page 60: Testing 500 pages

60

Page 61: Testing 500 pages

61

Page 62: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

62

Page 63: Testing 500 pages

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

CONTENTS PAGE No.

11. Introduction 3

12. Principle 4

13. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

14. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

15. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

16. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

17. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

18. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

19. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

20. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

III. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

II. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

IV. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

63

Page 64: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

64

Page 65: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

65

Page 66: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

66

Page 67: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

67

Page 68: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

68

Page 69: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

69

Page 70: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

7. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

8. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

9. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

70

Page 71: Testing 500 pages

10. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

11. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

12. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

71

Page 72: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

72

Page 73: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

73

Page 74: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

4. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

74

Page 75: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

75

Page 76: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

76

Page 77: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

77

Page 78: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

78

Page 79: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

79

Page 80: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

80

Page 81: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

81

Page 82: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

82

Page 83: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

83

Page 84: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

84

Page 85: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

85

Page 86: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

86

Page 87: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

87

Page 88: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

88

Page 89: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

89

MIC (g/ml)

Page 90: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

5. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

6. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

7. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

8. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

90

Page 91: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

3. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

4. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

91

Page 92: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

92

Page 93: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

93

Page 94: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

94

Page 95: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

95

Page 96: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

96

Page 97: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

97

Page 98: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

98

Page 99: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

99

Page 100: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

100

Page 101: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

101

Page 102: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

102

Page 103: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

103

Page 104: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

104

Page 105: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

105

Page 106: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

106

Page 107: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

h. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

i. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

j. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

k. These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial agents

that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

l. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

107

Page 108: Testing 500 pages

m. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

n. Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

108

Page 109: Testing 500 pages

109

Page 110: Testing 500 pages

110

Page 111: Testing 500 pages

111

Page 112: Testing 500 pages

112

Page 113: Testing 500 pages

113

Page 114: Testing 500 pages

114

Page 115: Testing 500 pages

115

Page 116: Testing 500 pages

116

Page 117: Testing 500 pages

117

Page 118: Testing 500 pages

118

Page 119: Testing 500 pages

119

Page 120: Testing 500 pages

120

Page 121: Testing 500 pages

121

Page 122: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

122

Page 123: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

21. Introduction 3

22. Principle 4

23. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

24. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

25. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

26. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

27. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

28. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

29. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

30. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

V. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

III. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

VI. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

123

Page 124: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

124

Page 125: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

125

Page 126: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

126

Page 127: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

127

Page 128: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

128

Page 129: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

129

Page 130: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

13. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

14. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

15. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

130

Page 131: Testing 500 pages

16. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

17. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

18. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

131

Page 132: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

132

Page 133: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

133

Page 134: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

5. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

134

Page 135: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

135

Page 136: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

136

Page 137: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

137

Page 138: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

138

Page 139: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

139

Page 140: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

140

Page 141: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

141

Page 142: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

142

Page 143: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

143

Page 144: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

144

Page 145: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

145

Page 146: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

146

Page 147: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

147

Page 148: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

148

Page 149: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

149

MIC (g/ml)

Page 150: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

9. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

10. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

11. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

12. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

150

Page 151: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

5. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

6. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

151

Page 152: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

152

Page 153: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

153

Page 154: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

154

Page 155: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

155

Page 156: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

156

Page 157: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

157

Page 158: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

158

Page 159: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

159

Page 160: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

160

Page 161: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

161

Page 162: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

162

Page 163: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

163

Page 164: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

164

Page 165: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

165

Page 166: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

166

Page 167: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

o. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

p. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

q. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

r. These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial agents

that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

s. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

167

Page 168: Testing 500 pages

t. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

u. Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

168

Page 169: Testing 500 pages

169

Page 170: Testing 500 pages

170

Page 171: Testing 500 pages

171

Page 172: Testing 500 pages

172

Page 173: Testing 500 pages

173

Page 174: Testing 500 pages

174

Page 175: Testing 500 pages

175

Page 176: Testing 500 pages

176

Page 177: Testing 500 pages

177

Page 178: Testing 500 pages

178

Page 179: Testing 500 pages

179

Page 180: Testing 500 pages

180

Page 181: Testing 500 pages

181

Page 182: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

182

Page 183: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

31. Introduction 3

32. Principle 4

33. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

34. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

35. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

36. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

37. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

38. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

39. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

40. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

VII. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

IV. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

VIII. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

183

Page 184: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

184

Page 185: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

185

Page 186: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

186

Page 187: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

187

Page 188: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

188

Page 189: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

189

Page 190: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

19. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

20. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

21. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

190

Page 191: Testing 500 pages

22. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

23. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

24. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

191

Page 192: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

192

Page 193: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

193

Page 194: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

6. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

194

Page 195: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

195

Page 196: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

196

Page 197: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

197

Page 198: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

198

Page 199: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

199

Page 200: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

200

Page 201: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

201

Page 202: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

202

Page 203: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

203

Page 204: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

204

Page 205: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

205

Page 206: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

206

Page 207: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

207

Page 208: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

208

Page 209: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

209

MIC (g/ml)

Page 210: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

13. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

14. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

15. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

16. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

210

Page 211: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

7. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

8. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

211

Page 212: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

212

Page 213: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

213

Page 214: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

214

Page 215: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

215

Page 216: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

216

Page 217: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

217

Page 218: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

218

Page 219: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

219

Page 220: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

220

Page 221: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

221

Page 222: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

222

Page 223: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

223

Page 224: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

224

Page 225: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

225

Page 226: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

226

Page 227: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

v. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

w. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

x. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

y. These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial agents

that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

z. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

227

Page 228: Testing 500 pages

aa. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

bb. Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

228

Page 229: Testing 500 pages

229

Page 230: Testing 500 pages

230

Page 231: Testing 500 pages

231

Page 232: Testing 500 pages

232

Page 233: Testing 500 pages

233

Page 234: Testing 500 pages

234

Page 235: Testing 500 pages

235

Page 236: Testing 500 pages

236

Page 237: Testing 500 pages

237

Page 238: Testing 500 pages

238

Page 239: Testing 500 pages

239

Page 240: Testing 500 pages

240

Page 241: Testing 500 pages

241

Page 242: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

242

Page 243: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

41. Introduction 3

42. Principle 4

43. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

44. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

45. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

46. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

47. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

48. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

49. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

50. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

IX. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

V. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

X. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

243

Page 244: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

244

Page 245: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

245

Page 246: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

246

Page 247: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

247

Page 248: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

248

Page 249: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

249

Page 250: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

25. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

26. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

27. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

250

Page 251: Testing 500 pages

28. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

29. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

30. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

251

Page 252: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

252

Page 253: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

253

Page 254: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

7. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

254

Page 255: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

255

Page 256: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

256

Page 257: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

257

Page 258: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

258

Page 259: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

259

Page 260: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

260

Page 261: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

261

Page 262: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

262

Page 263: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

263

Page 264: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

264

Page 265: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

265

Page 266: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

266

Page 267: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

267

Page 268: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

268

Page 269: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

269

MIC (g/ml)

Page 270: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

17. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

18. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

19. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

20. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

270

Page 271: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

9. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

10. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

271

Page 272: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

272

Page 273: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

273

Page 274: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

274

Page 275: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

275

Page 276: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

276

Page 277: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

277

Page 278: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

278

Page 279: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

279

Page 280: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

280

Page 281: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

281

Page 282: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

282

Page 283: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

283

Page 284: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

284

Page 285: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

285

Page 286: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

286

Page 287: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

cc. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

dd. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

ee. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

ff. These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial agents

that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

gg. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

287

Page 288: Testing 500 pages

hh. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

ii. Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

288

Page 289: Testing 500 pages

289

Page 290: Testing 500 pages

290

Page 291: Testing 500 pages

291

Page 292: Testing 500 pages

292

Page 293: Testing 500 pages

293

Page 294: Testing 500 pages

294

Page 295: Testing 500 pages

295

Page 296: Testing 500 pages

296

Page 297: Testing 500 pages

297

Page 298: Testing 500 pages

298

Page 299: Testing 500 pages

299

Page 300: Testing 500 pages

300

Page 301: Testing 500 pages

301

Page 302: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

302

Page 303: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

51. Introduction 3

52. Principle 4

53. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

54. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

55. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

56. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

57. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

58. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

59. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

60. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

XI. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

VI. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

XII. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

303

Page 304: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

304

Page 305: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

305

Page 306: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

306

Page 307: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

307

Page 308: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

308

Page 309: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

309

Page 310: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

31. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

32. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

33. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

310

Page 311: Testing 500 pages

34. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

35. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

36. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

311

Page 312: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

312

Page 313: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

313

Page 314: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

8. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

314

Page 315: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

315

Page 316: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

316

Page 317: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

317

Page 318: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

318

Page 319: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

319

Page 320: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

320

Page 321: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

321

Page 322: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

322

Page 323: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

323

Page 324: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

324

Page 325: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

325

Page 326: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

326

Page 327: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

327

Page 328: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

328

Page 329: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

329

MIC (g/ml)

Page 330: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

21. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

22. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

23. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

24. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

330

Page 331: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

11. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

12. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

331

Page 332: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

332

Page 333: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

333

Page 334: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

334

Page 335: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

335

Page 336: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

336

Page 337: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

337

Page 338: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

338

Page 339: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

339

Page 340: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

340

Page 341: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

341

Page 342: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

342

Page 343: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

343

Page 344: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

344

Page 345: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

345

Page 346: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

346

Page 347: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

jj. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

kk. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

ll. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

mm.These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial

agents that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

nn. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

347

Page 348: Testing 500 pages

oo. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

pp. Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

348

Page 349: Testing 500 pages

349

Page 350: Testing 500 pages

350

Page 351: Testing 500 pages

351

Page 352: Testing 500 pages

352

Page 353: Testing 500 pages

353

Page 354: Testing 500 pages

354

Page 355: Testing 500 pages

355

Page 356: Testing 500 pages

356

Page 357: Testing 500 pages

357

Page 358: Testing 500 pages

358

Page 359: Testing 500 pages

359

Page 360: Testing 500 pages

360

Page 361: Testing 500 pages

361

Page 362: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

362

Page 363: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

61. Introduction 3

62. Principle 4

63. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

64. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

65. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

66. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

67. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

68. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

69. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

70. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

XIII. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

VII. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

XIV. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

363

Page 364: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

364

Page 365: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

365

Page 366: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

366

Page 367: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

367

Page 368: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

368

Page 369: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

369

Page 370: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

37. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

38. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

39. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

370

Page 371: Testing 500 pages

40. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

41. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

42. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

371

Page 372: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

372

Page 373: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

373

Page 374: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

9. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

374

Page 375: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

375

Page 376: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

376

Page 377: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

377

Page 378: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

378

Page 379: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

379

Page 380: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

380

Page 381: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

381

Page 382: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

382

Page 383: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

383

Page 384: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

384

Page 385: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

385

Page 386: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

386

Page 387: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

387

Page 388: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

388

Page 389: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

389

MIC (g/ml)

Page 390: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

25. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

26. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

27. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

28. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

390

Page 391: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

13. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

14. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

391

Page 392: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

392

Page 393: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

393

Page 394: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

394

Page 395: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

395

Page 396: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

396

Page 397: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

397

Page 398: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

398

Page 399: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

399

Page 400: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

400

Page 401: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

401

Page 402: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

402

Page 403: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

403

Page 404: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

404

Page 405: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

405

Page 406: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

406

Page 407: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

qq. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

rr. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

ss. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

tt. These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial agents

that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

uu. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

407

Page 408: Testing 500 pages

vv. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

ww.Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

408

Page 409: Testing 500 pages

409

Page 410: Testing 500 pages

410

Page 411: Testing 500 pages

411

Page 412: Testing 500 pages

412

Page 413: Testing 500 pages

413

Page 414: Testing 500 pages

414

Page 415: Testing 500 pages

415

Page 416: Testing 500 pages

416

Page 417: Testing 500 pages

417

Page 418: Testing 500 pages

418

Page 419: Testing 500 pages

419

Page 420: Testing 500 pages

420

Page 421: Testing 500 pages

421

Page 422: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

422

Page 423: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

71. Introduction 3

72. Principle 4

73. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

74. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

75. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

76. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

77. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

78. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

79. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

80. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

XV. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

VIII. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

XVI. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

423

Page 424: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

424

Page 425: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

425

Page 426: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

426

Page 427: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

427

Page 428: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

428

Page 429: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

429

Page 430: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

43. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

44. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

45. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

430

Page 431: Testing 500 pages

46. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

47. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

48. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

431

Page 432: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

432

Page 433: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

433

Page 434: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

10. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

434

Page 435: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

435

Page 436: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

436

Page 437: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

437

Page 438: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

438

Page 439: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

439

Page 440: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

440

Page 441: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

441

Page 442: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

442

Page 443: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

443

Page 444: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

444

Page 445: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

445

Page 446: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

446

Page 447: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

447

Page 448: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

448

Page 449: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

449

MIC (g/ml)

Page 450: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

29. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

30. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

31. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

32. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

450

Page 451: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

15. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

16. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

451

Page 452: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

452

Page 453: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

453

Page 454: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

454

Page 455: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

455

Page 456: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

456

Page 457: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

457

Page 458: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

458

Page 459: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

459

Page 460: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

460

Page 461: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

461

Page 462: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

462

Page 463: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

463

Page 464: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

464

Page 465: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

465

Page 466: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

466

Page 467: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

xx. Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

yy. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

zz. Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

aaa.These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial agents

that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

bbb.Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the

ceftazidme to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of

the required water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution

and water is added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as

possible, but can be stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

467

Page 468: Testing 500 pages

ccc.These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

ddd.Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

468

Page 469: Testing 500 pages

469

Page 470: Testing 500 pages

470

Page 471: Testing 500 pages

471

Page 472: Testing 500 pages

472

Page 473: Testing 500 pages

473

Page 474: Testing 500 pages

474

Page 475: Testing 500 pages

475

Page 476: Testing 500 pages

476

Page 477: Testing 500 pages

477

Page 478: Testing 500 pages

478

Page 479: Testing 500 pages

479

Page 480: Testing 500 pages

480

Page 481: Testing 500 pages

481

Page 482: Testing 500 pages

Manual on Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing(Under the auspices of Indian Association of Medical Microbiologists)

Dr. M.K. Lalitha

Professor of Microbiology

Department of Microbiology

Christian Medical College

Vellore, Tamil Nadu

482

Page 483: Testing 500 pages

CONTENTS PAGE No.

81. Introduction 3

82. Principle 4

83. Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 5

84. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 6

4.1 Disk Diffusion 7

4.2 Dilution 14

4.3 Dilution And Diffusion. 20

85. Susceptibility Testing Of Fastidious Bacteria 21

86. Errors in Interpretation and reporting Results 28

87. Quality Control in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 29

88. Standard Methods for the Detection of Antimicrobial Resistance. 30

89. Application of Computers in Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing 39

90. Selected Bibliography 41

Annexure 43

XVII. Guide lines for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

IX. Suggested Dilution Ranges for MIC Testing

XVIII. Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

483

Page 484: Testing 500 pages

1. Introduction

Resistance to antimicrobial agents (AMR) has resulted in morbidity and mortality from

treatment failures and increased health care costs. Although defining the precise public

health risk and estimating the increase in costs is not a simple undertaking, there is little

doubt that emergent antibiotic resistance is a serious global problem.

Appropriate antimicrobial drug use has unquestionable benefit, but physicians and the

public frequently use these agents inappropriately. Inappropriate use results from physicians

providing antimicrobial drugs to treat viral infections, using inadequate criteria for diagnosis

of infections that potentially have a bacterial aetiology, unnecessarily prescribing expensive,

broad-spectrum agents, and not following established recommendations for using chemo

prophylaxis. The availability of antibiotics over the counter, despite regulations to the

contrary, also fuel inappropriate usage of antimicrobial drugs in India. The easy availability

of antimicrobial drugs leads to their incorporation into herbal or "folk" remedies, which also

increases inappropriate use of these agents.

Widespread antibiotic usage exerts a selective pressure that acts as a driving force in the

development of antibiotic resistance. The association between increased rates of

antimicrobial use and resistance has been documented for nosocomial infections as well as

for resistant community acquired infections. As resistance develops to "first-line"

antibiotics, therapy with new, broader spectrum, more expensive antibiotics increases, but is

followed by development of resistance to the new class of drugs.

Resistance factors, particularly those carried on mobile elements, can spread rapidly within

human and animal populations. Multidrug-resistant pathogens travel not only locally but

also globally, with newly introduced pathogens spreading rapidly in susceptible hosts.

Antibiotic resistance patterns may vary locally and regionally, so surveillance data needs to

be collected from selected sentinel sources. Patterns can change rapidly and they need to be

monitored closely because of their implications for public health and as an indicator of

appropriate or inappropriate antibiotic usage by physicians in that area.

484

Page 485: Testing 500 pages

The results of in-vitro antibiotic susceptibility testing, guide clinicians in the appropriate

selection of initial empiric regimens and, drugs used for individual patients in specific

situations. The selection of an antibiotic panel for susceptibility testing is based on the

commonly observed susceptibility patterns, and is revised periodically.

2. Principle

The principles of determining the effectivity of a noxious agent to a bacterium were well

enumerated by Rideal ,Walker and others at the turn of the century, the discovery of

antibiotics made these tests(or their modification)too cumbersome for the large numbers

of tests necessary to be put up as a routine. The ditch plate method of agar diffusion used

by Alexander Fleming was the forerunner of a variety of agar diffusion methods devised

by workers in this field .The Oxford group used these methods initially to assay the

antibiotic contained in blood by allowing the antibiotics to diffuse out of reservoirs in the

medium in containers placed on the surface.

With the introduction of a variety of antimicrobials it became necessary to perform the

antimicrobial susceptibility test as a routine. For this, the antimicrobial contained in a

reservoir was allowed to diffuse out into the medium and interact in a plate freshly

seeded with the test organisms. Even now a variety of antimicrobial containing

reservoirs are used but the antimicrobial impregnated absorbent paper disc is by far the

commonest type used. The disc diffusion method of AST is the most practical method

and is still the method of choice for the average laboratory. Automation may force the

method out of the diagnostic laboratory but in this country as well as in the smaller

laboratories of even advanced countries, it will certainly be the most commonly carried

out microbiological test for many years to come. It is, therefore, imperative that

microbiologists understand the principles of the test well and keep updating the

information as and when necessary. All techniques involve either diffusion of

antimicrobial agent in agar or dilution of antibiotic in agar or broth.

Even automated techniques are variations of the above methods.

485

Page 486: Testing 500 pages

3.

Factors Influencing Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

pH

The pH of each batch of Müeller-Hinton agar should be checked when the medium is

prepared. The exact method used will depend largely on the type of equipment available in

the laboratory. The agar medium should have a pH between 7.2 and 7.4 at room temperature

after gelling. If the pH is too low, certain drugs will appear to lose potency (e.g.,

aminoglycosides, quinolones, and macrolides), while other agents may appear to have

excessive activity (e.g., tetracyclines). If the pH is too high, the opposite effects can be

expected. The pH can be checked by one of the following means:

* Macerate a sufficient amount of agar to submerge the tip of a pH electrode.

* Allow a small amount of agar to solidify around the tip of a pH electrode in a beaker

or cup.

* Use a properly calibrated surface electrode.

Moisture

If, just before use, excess surface moisture is present, the plates should be placed in an

incubator (35C) or a laminar flow hood at room temperature with lids ajar until excess

surface moisture is lost by evaporation (usually 10 to 30 minutes). The surface should be

moist, but no droplets of moisture should be apparent on the surface of the medium or on the

petri dish covers when the plates are inoculated.

Effects of Thymidine or Thymine

Media containing excessive amounts of thymidine or thymine can reverse the inhibitory

effect of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, thus yielding smaller and less distinct zones, or

even no zone at all, which may result in false-resistance reports. Müeller-Hinton agar that is

as low in thymidine content as possible should be used. To evaluate a new lot of Müeller-

Hinton agar, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, or alternatively, E. faecalis ATCC 33186,

should be tested with trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole disks. Satisfactory media will provide

essentially clear, distinct zones of inhibition 20 mm or greater in diameter. Unsatisfactory

486

Page 487: Testing 500 pages

media will produce no zone of inhibition, growth within the zone, or a zone of less than 20

mm.

Effects of Variation in Divalent Cations

Variation in divalent cations, principally magnesium and calcium, will affect results of

aminoglycoside and tetracycline tests with P. aeruginosa strains. Excessive cation content

will reduce zone sizes, whereas low cation content may result in unacceptably large zones of

inhibition. Excess zinc ions may reduce zone sizes of carbapenems. Performance tests with

each lot of Müeller-Hinton agar must conform to the control limits.

Testing strains that fail to grow satisfactorily

Only aerobic or facultative bacteria that grow well on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar

should be tested on that medium. Certain fastidious bacteria such as Haemophilus spp.,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. pneumoniae, and viridans and ß-haemolytic streptococci do not grow

sufficiently on unsupplemented Müeller-Hinton agar. These organisms require supplements

or different media to grow, and they should be tested on the media described in separate

sections.

4. Methods of Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial susceptibility testing methods are divided into types based on the principle

applied in each system. They include:

Diffusion Dilution Diffusion&Dilution

Stokes method Minimum Inhibitory Concentration E-Test method

Kirby-Bauer method i) Broth dilution

ii)Agar Dilution

487

Page 488: Testing 500 pages

4.1 Disk Diffusion

Reagents for the Disk Diffusion Test

1. Müeller-Hinton Agar Medium

Of the many media available, Müeller-Hinton agar is considered to be the best for routine

susceptibility testing of nonfastidious bacteria for the following reasons:

* It shows acceptable batch-to-batch reproducibility for susceptibility testing.

* It is low in sulphonamide, trimethoprim, and tetracycline inhibitors.

* It gives satisfactory growth of most nonfastidious pathogens.

* A large body of data and experience has been collected concerning susceptibility

tests performed with this medium.

Although Müeller-Hinton agar is reliable generally for susceptibility testing, results obtained

with some batches may, on occasion, vary significantly. If a batch of medium does not

support adequate growth of a test organism, zones obtained in a disk diffusion test will

usually be larger than expected and may exceed the acceptable quality control limits. Only

Müeller-Hinton medium formulations that have been tested according to, and that meet the

acceptance limits described in, NCCLS document M62-A7- Protocols for Evaluating

Dehydrated Müeller-Hinton Agar should be used.

Preparation of Müeller-Hinton Agar

Müeller-Hinton agar preparation includes the following steps.

1. Müeller-Hinton agar should be prepared from a commercially available dehydrated

base according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Immediately after autoclaving, allow it to cool in a 45 to 50C water bath.

3. Pour the freshly prepared and cooled medium into glass or plastic, flat-bottomed

petri dishes on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of approximately 4

mm. This corresponds to 60 to 70 ml of medium for plates with diameters of 150

mm and 25 to 30 ml for plates with a diameter of 100 mm.

4. The agar medium should be allowed to cool to room temperature and, unless the

plate is used the same day, stored in a refrigerator (2 to 8C).

488

Page 489: Testing 500 pages

5. Plates should be used within seven days after preparation unless adequate

precautions, such as wrapping in plastic, have been taken to minimize drying of the

agar.

6. A representative sample of each batch of plates should be examined for sterility by

incubating at 30 to 35C for 24 hours or longer.

2. Preparation of antibiotic stock solutions

Antibitiotics may be received as powders or tablets. It is recommended to obtain pure

antibiotics from commercial sources, and not use injectable solutions. Powders must be

accurately weighed and dissolved in the appropriate diluents (Annexure III) to yield the

required concentration, using sterile glassware. Standard strains of stock cultures should be

used to evaluate the antibiotic stock solution. If satisfactory, the stock can be aliquoted in 5

ml volumes and frozen at -20ºC or -60ºC.

Stock solutions are prepared using the formula (1000/P) X V X C=W, where P+potency of

the anitbiotic base, V=volume in ml required, C=final concentration of solution and

W=weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in V.

Preparation of dried filter paper discs

Whatman filter paper no. 1 is used to prepare discs approximately 6 mm in diameter, which

are placed in a Petri dish and sterilized in a hot air oven.

The loop used for delivering the antibiotics is made of 20 gauge wire and has a diameter of

2 mm. This delivers 0.005 ml of antibiotics to each disc.

Storage of commercial antimicrobial discs

Cartridges containing commercially prepared paper disks specifically for susceptibility

testing are generally packaged to ensure appropriate anhydrous conditions. Discs should be

stored as follows:

* Refrigerate the containers at 8C or below, or freeze at -14C or below, in a nonfrost-

free freezer until needed. Sealed packages of disks that contain drugs from the ß-

lactam class should be stored frozen, except for a small working supply, which may

489

Page 490: Testing 500 pages

be refrigerated for at most one week. Some labile agents (e.g., imipenem, cefaclor,

and clavulanic acid combinations) may retain greater stability if stored frozen until

the day of use.

* The unopened disc containers should be removed from the refrigerator or freezer

one to two hours before use, so they may equilibrate to room temperature before

opening. This procedure minimizes the amount of condensation that occurs when

warm air contacts cold disks.

* Once a cartridge of discs has been removed from its sealed package, it should be

placed in a tightly sealed, desiccated container. When using a disc-dispensing

apparatus, it should be fitted with a tight cover and supplied with an adequate

desiccant. The dispenser should be allowed to warm to room temperature before

opening. Excessive moisture should be avoided by replacing the desiccant when the

indicator changes color.

* When not in use, the dispensing apparatus containing the discs should always be

refrigerated.

* Only those discs that have not reached the manufacturer's expiration date stated on

the label may be used. Discs should be discarded on the expiration date.

Turbidity standard for inoculum preparation

To standardize the inoculum density for a susceptibility test, a BaSO4 turbidity standard,

equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard or its optical equivalent (e.g., latex particle

suspension), should be used. A BaSO4 0.5 McFarland standard may be prepared as follows:

49. A 0.5-ml aliquot of 0.048 mol/L BaCl2 (1.175% w/v BaCl2 . 2H2O) is added to 99.5

ml of 0.18 mol/L H2SO4 (1% v/v) with constant stirring to maintain a suspension.

50. The correct density of the turbidity standard should be verified by using a

spectrophotometer with a 1-cm light path and matched cuvette to determine the

absorbance. The absorbance at 625 nm should be 0.008 to 0.10 for the 0.5

McFarland standard.

51. The Barium Sulfate suspension should be transferred in 4 to 6 ml aliquots into

screw-cap tubes of the same size as those used in growing or diluting the bacterial

inoculum.

490

Page 491: Testing 500 pages

52. These tubes should be tightly sealed and stored in the dark at room temperature.

53. The barium sulfate turbidity standard should be vigorously agitated on a mechanical

vortex mixer before each use and inspected for a uniformly turbid appearance. If

large particles appear, the standard should be replaced. Latex particle suspensions

should be mixed by inverting gently, not on a vortex mixer

54. The barium sulfate standards should be replaced or their densities verified monthly.

Disc diffusion methods

The Kirby-Bauer and Stokes' methods are usually used for antimicrobial susceptibility

testing, with the Kirby-Bauer method being recommended by the NCCLS. The accuracy

and reproducibility of this test are dependent on maintaining a standard set of procedures as

described here.

NCCLS is an international, interdisciplinary, non-profit, non-governmental organization

composed of medical professionals, government, industry, healthcare providers, educators

etc. It promotes accurate antimicrobial susceptibility testing (AST) and appropriate reporting

by developing standard reference methods, interpretative criteria for the results of standard

AST methods, establishing quality control parameters for standard test methods, provides

testing and reporting strategies that are clinically relevant and cost-effective

Interpretative criteria of NCCLS are developed based on international collaborative

studies and well correlated with MIC’s and the results have corroborated with clinical

data. Based on study results NCCLS interpretative criteria are revised frequently. NCCLS

is approved by FDA-USA and recommended by WHO.

Procedure for Performing the Disc Diffusion Test

Inoculum Preparation

Growth Method

The growth method is performed as follows

1. At least three to five well-isolated colonies of the same morphological type are

selected from an agar plate culture. The top of each colony is touched with a loop,

491

Page 492: Testing 500 pages

and the growth is transferred into a tube containing 4 to 5 ml of a suitable broth

medium, such as tryptic soy broth.

2. The broth culture is incubated at 35C until it achieves or exceeds the turbidity of the

0.5 McFarland standard (usually 2 to 6 hours)

3. The turbidity of the actively growing broth culture is adjusted with sterile saline or

broth to obtain a turbidity optically comparable to that of the 0.5 McFarland

standard. This results in a suspension containing approximately 1 to 2 x 108 CFU/ml

for E.coli ATCC 25922. To perform this step properly, either a photometric device

can be used or, if done visually, adequate light is needed to visually compare the

inoculum tube and the 0.5 McFarland standard against a card with a white

background and contrasting black lines.

Direct Colony Suspension Method

1. As a convenient alternative to the growth method, the inoculum can be prepared by

making a direct broth or saline suspension of isolated colonies selected from a 18- to

24-hour agar plate (a nonselective medium, such as blood agar, should be used).

The suspension is adjusted to match the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard, using

saline and a vortex mixer.

2. This approach is the recommended method for testing the fastidious organisms,

Haemophilus spp., N. gonorrhoeae, and streptococci, and for testing staphylococci

for potential methicillin or oxacillin resistance.

Inoculation of Test Plates

1. Optimally, within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum

suspension, a sterile cotton swab is dipped into the adjusted suspension. The swab

should be rotated several times and pressed firmly on the inside wall of the tube

above the fluid level. This will remove excess inoculum from the swab.

2. The dried surface of a Müeller-Hinton agar plate is inoculated by streaking the swab

over the entire sterile agar surface. This procedure is repeated by streaking two

more times, rotating the plate approximately 60 each time to ensure an even

distribution of inoculum. As a final step, the rim of the agar is swabbed.

492

Page 493: Testing 500 pages

3. The lid may be left ajar for 3 to 5 minutes, but no more than 15 minutes, to allow for

any excess surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the drug impregnated

disks.

NOTE: Extremes in inoculum density must be avoided. Never use undiluted overnight

broth cultures or other unstandardized inocula for streaking plates.

Application of Discs to Inoculated Agar Plates

1. The predetermined battery of antimicrobial discs is dispensed onto the surface of the

inoculated agar plate. Each disc must be pressed down to ensure complete contact

with the agar surface. Whether the discs are placed individually or with a dispensing

apparatus, they must be distributed evenly so that they are no closer than 24 mm

from center to center. Ordinarily, no more than 12 discs should be placed on one 150

mm plate or more than 5 discs on a 100 mm plate. Because some of the drug

diffuses almost instantaneously, a disc should not be relocated once it has come into

contact with the agar surface. Instead, place a new disc in another location on the

agar.

2. The plates are inverted and placed in an incubator set to 35C within 15 minutes

after the discs are applied. With the exception of Haemophilus spp., streptococci and

N. gonorrhoeae, the plates should not be incubated in an increased CO2 atmosphere,

because the interpretive standards were developed by using ambient air incubation,

and CO2 will significantly alter the size of the inhibitory zones of some agents.

Reading Plates and Interpreting Results

1. After 16 to 18 hours of incubation, each plate is examined. If the plate was

satisfactorily streaked, and the inoculum was correct, the resulting zones of

inhibition will be uniformly circular and there will be a confluent lawn of growth. If

individual colonies are apparent, the inoculum was too light and the test must be

repeated. The diameters of the zones of complete inhibition (as judged by the

unaided eye) are measured, including the diameter of the disc. Zones are measured

493

Page 494: Testing 500 pages

to the nearest whole millimeter, using sliding calipers or a ruler, which is held on the

back of the inverted petri plate. The petri plate is held a few inches above a black,

nonreflecting background and illuminated with reflected light. If blood was added

to the agar base (as with streptococci), the zones are measured from the upper

surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the cover removed. If the

test organism is a Staphylococcus or Enterococcus spp., 24 hours of incubation are

required for vancomycin and oxacillin, but other agents can be read at 16 to 18

hours. Transmitted light (plate held up to light) is used to examine the oxacillin and

vancomycin zones for light growth of methicillin- or vancomycin- resistant colonies,

respectively, within apparent zones of inhibition. Any discernable growth within

zone of inhibition is indicative of methicillin or vancomycin resistance.

2. The zone margin should be taken as the area showing no obvious, visible growth

that can be detected with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies, which can

be detected only with a magnifying lens at the edge of the zone of inhibited growth,

is ignored. However, discrete colonies growing within a clear zone of inhibition

should be subcultured, re-identified, and retested. Strains of Proteus spp. may

swarm into areas of inhibited growth around certain antimicrobial agents. With

Proteus spp., the thin veil of swarming growth in an otherwise obvious zone of

inhibition should be ignored. When using blood-supplemented medium for testing

streptococci, the zone of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of

inhibition of hemolysis. With trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the

medium may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight growth (20% or

less of the lawn of growth), and measure the more obvious margin to determine the

zone diameter.

11. The sizes of the zones of inhibition are interpreted by referring to Tables 2A through

2I (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for

Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement, and the

organisms are reported as either susceptible, intermediate, or resistant to the agents

494

Page 495: Testing 500 pages

that have been tested. Some agents may only be reported as susceptible, since only

susceptible breakpoints are given.

4.2 Dilution Methods

Dilution susceptibility testing methods are used to determine the minimal concentration

of antimicrobial to inhibit or kill the microorganism. This can be achieved by dilution of

antimicrobial in either agar or broth media. Antimicrobials are tested in log 2 serial

dilutions (two fold).

Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC)

Diffusion tests widely used to determine the susceptibility of organisms isolated from

clinical specimens have their limitations; when equivocal results are obtained or in

prolonged serious infection e.g. bacterial endocarditis, the quantitation of antibiotic

action vis-a-vis the pathogen needs to be more precise. Also the terms ‘Susceptible’ and

‘Resistant’ can have a realistic interpretation. Thus when in doubt, the way to a precise

assessment is to determine the MIC of the antibiotic to the organisms concerned.

There are two methods of testing for MIC:

(a) Broth dilution method

(b) Agar dilution method.

Broth Dilution Method

The Broth Dilution method is a simple procedure for testing a small number of isolates,

even single isolate. It has the added advantage that the same tubes can be taken for

MBC tests also:

Materials

Sterile graduated pipettes of 10ml, 5ml, 2ml and 1ml Sterile capped 7.5 x 1.3 cm tubes /

small screw-capped bottles, Pasteur pipettes, overnight broth culture of test and control or-

ganisms ( same as for disc diffusion tests), required antibiotic in powder form (either from

the manufacturer or standard laboratory accompanied by a statement of its activity in mg/

495

Page 496: Testing 500 pages

unit or per ml. Clinical preparations should not be used for reference technique.), re-

quired solvent for the antibiotic, sterile Distilled Water - 500ml and suitable nutrient broth

medium.

Trimethoprim and sulphonamide testing requires thymidine free media or addition of 4%

lysed horse blood to the media

A suitable rack to hold 22 tubes in two rows i-e 11 tubes in each row.

Stock solution

Stock solution can be prepared using the formula

1000 ------- x V x C= W

P

Where P=Potency given by the manufacturer in relation to the base

V= Volume in ml required

C=Final concentration of solution (multiples of 1000)

W= Weight of the antimicrobial to be dissolved in the volume V

Example: For making 10 ml solution of the strength 10,000mg/l from powder base whose

potency is 980 mg per gram,the quantities of the antimicrobials required is

W = 1000 ------- x 10 x 10=102.04mg

980

Note:the stock solutions are made in higher concentrations to maintain their keeping

qualities and stored in suitable aliquots at -20oC .Once taken out,they should not be

refrozen or reused.

Suggested dilution ranges of some antimicrobials are shown in Annexure II.

Method

Prepare stock dilutions of the antibiotic of concentrations 1000 and 100 µg/L as required

from original stock solution (10,000mg/L). Arrange two rows of 12 sterile 7.5 x1.3 cm

496

Page 497: Testing 500 pages

capped tubes in the rack. In a sterile 30ml (universal) screw capped bottle, prepare 8ml of

broth containing the concentration of antibiotic required for the first tube in each row

from the appropriate stock solution already made. Mix the contents of the universal bottle

using a pipette and transfer 2ml to the first tube in each row. Using a fresh pipette ,add 4

ml of broth to the remaining 4 ml in the universal bottle mix and transfer 2ml to the

second tube in each row. Continue preparing dilutions in this way but where as many as

10 or more are required the series should be started again half the way down. Place 2ml

of antibiotic free broth to the last tube in each row. Inoculate one row with one drop of an

overnight broth culture of the test organism diluted approximately to 1 in 1000 in a

suitable broth and the second row with the control organism of known sensitivity

similarly diluted. The result of the test is significantly affected by the size of the

inoculum.The test mixture should contain 106 organism/ml.If the broth culture used has

grown poorly,it may be necessary to use this undiluted. Incubate tubes for 18 hours at

37oC. Inoculate a tube containing 2ml broth with the organism and keep at +4oC in a

refrigerator overnight to be used as standard for the determination of complete inhibition.

Calculations for the preparation of the original dilution.

This often presents problems to those unaccustomed to performing these tests. The fol-

lowing method advocated by Pamela M Waterworth is presented. Calculate the total vol-

ume required for the first dilution. Two sets of dilution are being prepared (one for the

test and one for the control), each in 2ml volumes i-e a total of 4 ml for each concentra-

tion as 4ml is required to make the second dilution, the total requirement is 8ml. Now cal-

culate the total amount of the antibiotic required for 8ml. For 64 g/l concentration,

8x64mg/l =512µg in 8 ml. Place a decimal point after the first figure (5.12) and take this

volume in ml (i.e 5.12 ml) of the dilution below 512mg/l and make upto 8ml with broth.

In this example given above, the series has to be started again mid way at 2 mg/l which

would be obtained in the same way:

8ml of 2mg/l=16µg in 8ml.

1.6 ml of 10 mg/ l + 6.4 ml of broth.

497

Page 498: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the lowest dilution, which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube.

Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself, the inoculated tube kept

in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the determination of

complete inhibition.

Standard strain of known MIC value run with the test is used as the control to check the

reagents and conditions.

Minimum Bactericidal Concentrations(MBC)

The main advantage of the ‘Broth dilution’ method for the MIC determination lies in the

fact that it can readily be converted to determine the MBC as well.

Method

Dilutions and inoculations are prepared in the same manner as described for the

determination of MIC. The control tube containing no antibiotic is immediately

subcultured (Before incubation) by spreading a loopful evenly over a quarter of the plate

on a medium suitable for the growth of the test organism and incubated at 37oC

overnight. The tubes are also incubated overnight at 37oC. Read the MIC of the control

organism to check that the drug concentrations are correct. Note the lowest concentration

inhibiting growth of the organisms and record this as the MIC. Subculture all tubes not

showing visible growth in the same manner as the control tube described above and

incubate at 37oC overnight. Compare the amount of growth from the control tube before

incubation,which represents the original inoculum. The test must include a second set of

the same dilutions inoculated with an organism of known sensitivity .These tubes are not

subcultured; the purpose of the control is to confirm by its MIC that the drug level is

correct,whether or not this organism is killed is immaterial.

498

Page 499: Testing 500 pages

Reading of result

These subcultures may show

Similar number of colonies- indicating bacteriostasis only.

A reduced number of colonies-indicating a partial or slow bactericidal activity.

No growth- if the whole inoculum has been killed

The highest dilution showing at least 99% inhibition is taken as MBC

Micro-broth dilution test

This test uses double-strength Müeller-Hinton broth, 4X strength antibiotic solutions

prepared as serial two-fold dilutions and the test organism at a concentration of 2x106/ml. In

a 96 well plate, 100 l of double-strength MHB, 50 l each of the antibiotic dilutions and

the organism suspension are mixed and incubated at 35C for 18-24 hours. The lowest

concentration showing inhibition of growth will be considered the MIC of the organism.

Reading of result

MIC is expressed as the highest dilution which inhibited growth judged by lack of

turbidity in the tube. Because very faint turbidity may be given by the inoculum itself,the

inoculated tube kept in the refrigerator overnight may be used as the standard for the

determination of complete inhibition. Standard strain of known MIC, run with the test is

used as the control to check the reagents and conditions.

The Agar dilution Method

Agar dilutions are most often prepared in petri dishes and have advantage that it is

possible to test several organisms on each plate .If only one organism is to be tested e.g

M.tuberculosis,the dilutions can be prepared in agar slopes but it will then be necessary to

prepare a second identical set to be inoculated with the control organism.The dilutions are

made in a small volume of water and added to agar which has been melted and cooled to

not more than 60oC.Blood may be added and if ‘chocolate agar’ is required,the medium

must be heated before the antibiotic is added.

It would be convenient to use 90 mm diameter petri dishes and add

499

Page 500: Testing 500 pages

one ml of desired drug dilutions to 19 ml of broth.The factor of agar dilution must be

allowed for in the first calculation as follows.

final volume of medium in plate = 20 ml

Top antibiotic concentrations = 64mg/l

Total amount of drug = 1280µg to be added to

1 ml of water

2ml of 1280 µg /ml will be required to start the dilution = 2560µg in 2 ml

= 1.28ml of 2000µg /ml

± 0.72 ml of water.

1 ml of this will be added to 19 ml agar.

(Note stock dilution of 2000µg /ml is required for this range of MIC)

The quickest way to prepare a range of dilutions in agar is as follows:

Label a sterile petri dish on the base for each concentration required. Prepare the dilutions

in water placing 1 ml of each in the appropriate dish. One ml water is added to a control

plate. Pipette 19 ml melted agar, cooled to 55oC to each plate and mix thoroughly.

Adequate mixing is essential and if sufficient technical expertise is not available for the

skilled manipulation, it is strongly recommended that the agar is first measured into

stoppered tubes or universal containers and the drug dilution added to these and mixed by

inversion before pouring into petri dishes. After the plates have set they should be well

dried at 37oC with their lids tipped for 20 to 30 minutes in an incubator. They are then

inoculated either with a multiple inoculator as spots or with a wire loop or a platinum

loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml spread over a small area. In either case the culture

should be diluted to contain 105 to 106 organisms per ml. With ordinary fast growing

organisms, this can be obtained approximately by adding 5 µl of an overnight broth

culture to 5ml broth or peptone water.

It is possible to test spreading organism such as P.mirabilis by this method either by

cutting ditches in the agar between the inocula, or by confining each with small glass or

porcelain cylinders pressed into the agar. Although swarming of P.mirabilis can be

prevented by the use of higher concentration of agar in the medium, this is not

recommended for determination of MIC because of the difficulty of ensuring adequate

500

Page 501: Testing 500 pages

mixing of the drug with this very viscous medium. Selective media should not be used

and electrolyte deficient media will give false results because of the effect of variation in

the salt content on the action of many antibiotics.

Reading of results

The antibiotic concentration of the first plate showing 99% inhibition is taken as the MIC

for the organism.

4.3 Dilution and Diffusion

E test also known as the epsilometer test is an ‘exponential gradient’ testing methodology

where ‘E’ in E test refers to the Greek symbol epsilon ().The E test(AB Biodisk) which

is a quantitative method for antimicrobial susceptibility testing applies both the dilution

of antibiotic and diffusion of antibiotic into the medium.. A predefined stable

antimicrobial gradient is present on a thin inert carrier strip. When this E test strip is

applied onto an inoculated agar plate, there is an immediate release of the drug.

Following incubation , a symmetrical inhibition ellipse is produced. The intersection of

the inhibitory zone edge and the calibrated carrier strip indicates the MIC value over a

wide concentration range (>10 dilutions) with inherent precision and accuracy .

E test can be used to determine MIC for fastidious organisms like S. pneumoniae,

ß-hemolytic streptococci, N.gonorrhoeae, Haemophilus sp. and anaerobes. It can also be

used for Nonfermenting Gram Negative bacilli (NFGNB) for eg-Pseudomonas sp. and

Burkholderia pseudomallei.

Resistance of major consequence may be detected for e.g., the test is very useful in

detecting glycopeptide resistant Enterococci (GRE) and glycopeptide intermediate

S.aureus (GISA) and slow growing pathogens such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.

Further it can be used for detection of extended spectrum beta lactamases (ESBL). In

conclusion E test is a simple, accurate and reliable method to determine the MIC for a

wide spectrum of infectious agents.

501

Page 502: Testing 500 pages

5. Susceptibility of Fastidious Bacteria

DISC DIFFUSION FOR FASTIDIOUS ORGANISMS

Antibiotic susceptibility testing of S.pneumoniae

Media for disc diffusion

Müeller -Hinton Sheep blood agar

Standardization of inoculum.

The inocula for seeding the susceptibility media with S.pneumoniae is prepared from

fresh pure cultures (grown overnight on Chocolate agar). Cell suspensions of the

bacteria to be tested are prepared in sterile saline or Müeller-Hinton broth. The cell

suspension is prepared by transferring a portion of the fresh growth with a swab or

inoculating loop to the suspending medium, using caution when mixing the cells

with the suspending medium so as not to form bubbles. The suspension is then

compared to the McFarland standard by holding the suspension and McFarland standard

in front of a light against a white background with contrasting black lines and

comparing the turbidity. If the turbidity is too heavy, the suspension should be diluted

with additional suspending medium. If the turbidity is too light additional cells should

be added to the suspension.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension is made in normal saline and turbidity

adjusted to 0.5 McFarland standard. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the

suspension the plate should be inoculated.

Inoculation of the susceptibility test media

After proper turbidity is achieved, a new sterile swab (cotton or dacron) is submerged in

the suspension, lifted out of the broth, and the excess fluid is removed by pressing and

rotating the swab against the wall of the tube. The swab is then used to inoculate the

entire surface of the supplemented Müeller Hinton agar plate three times, rotating the

plate 60 degrees between each inoculation. The inoculum is allowed to dry (usually

taking only a few minutes but no longer than 15 minutes) before the discs are placed on

502

Page 503: Testing 500 pages

the plates. The discs should be placed on the agar with sterile forceps and tapped

gently to ensure the adherence to the agar. The plates containing the disks are incubated

at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction

jar may be used if a CO2 incubator is not available.

Estimating the susceptibility of the strains

After overnight incubation, the diameter of each zone of inhibition is measured with a

ruler or calipers. The zones of inhibition on the media containing blood are measured

from the top surface of the plate with the top removed. It is convenient to use a ruler

with a handle attached for these measurements, holding the ruler over the surface of the

disk when measuring the inhibition zone. Care should be taken not to touch the disk or

surface of the agar. Sterilize the ruler occasionally to prevent transmission of bacteria.

In all measurements, the zones of inhibition are measured from the edges of the last

visible colony-forming growth. The ruler should be positioned across the center of the

disc to make these measurements. The results are recorded in millimeters (mm) and

interpretation of susceptibility is obtained by comparing the results to the standard zone

sizes. For S.pneumoniae the zone measurement is from top of plate with the lid removed.

Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade from the more obvious zone should

be ignored in the measurement.

Interpretation

Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2G (Zone Diameter Interpretative

Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for S.pneumo-

niae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

Antibiotic susceptibility of Haemophilus species

503

Page 504: Testing 500 pages

The medium of choice for disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus sp. is Haemophilus Test

Medium (HTM). Müeller-Hinton chocolate agar is not recommended for routine testing of

Haemophilus spp.

In its agar form, Haemophilus Test medium consists of the following ingredients.

* Müeller-Hinton agar,

* 15 g/ml ß-NAD,

* 15 g/ml bovine hematin, and

* 5-mg/ml yeast extract.

To make HTM, first a fresh hematin stock solution is prepared by dissolving 50 mg of

bovine hematin powder in 100 ml of 0.01 mol/L NaOH with heat and stirring until the

powder is thoroughly dissolved. Thirty ml of the hematin stock solution are added to 1 L of

MHA with 5 g of yeast extract. After autoclaving and cooling to 45 to 50C, 3 ml of an

NAD stock solution (50 mg of NAD dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and filter

sterilized) are also aseptically added. The pH should be 7.2 to 7.4.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing Haemophilus

sp. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight (preferably 20 to 24 hour)

chocolate agar culture plate, a suspension of the test organism is prepared in

Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. The suspension should be adjusted to a

turbidity equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland standard using a photometric device. This

suspension will contain approximately 1 to 4 x 108 CFU/ml. Care must be exercised

in preparing this suspension, because higher inoculum concentrations may lead to

false-resistant results with some ß-lactam antibiotics, particularly when ß-lactamase

producing strains of H. influenzae are tested. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the

turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate inoculation.

504

Page 505: Testing 500 pages

2. The procedure for the disc test should be followed as described for nonfastidious

bacteria, except that, in general, no more than 9 discs should be applied to the

surface of a 150-mm plate or no more than 4 discs on a 100-mm plate.

3. Plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 16 to 18 hours before

measuring the zones of inhibition.

4. The zone margin should be considered as the area showing no obvious growth

visible with the unaided eye. Faint growth of tiny colonies that may appear to fade

from the more obvious zone should be ignored in the measurement.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of Haemophilus sp. are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2E (Zone Diameter In-

terpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints for

Haemophilus sp.) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Sus-

ceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate and re-

sistant. Disc diffusion testing of Haemophilus spp. with other agents is not recommended.

505

Page 506: Testing 500 pages

Antibiotic susceptibility testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae

The recommended medium for testing N. gonorrhoeae consists of GC agar to which a 1%

defined growth supplement is added after autoclaving. Cysteine-free growth supplement is

not required for disc testing. Enriched chocolate agar is not recommended for susceptibility

testing of N.gonorrhoeae.

Test Procedure

1. The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when testing

N. gonorrhoeae. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate agar

culture plate, a suspension equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard is

prepared in either Müeller-Hinton broth or 0.9% saline. Within 15 minutes after

adjusting the turbidity of the inoculum suspension, it should be used for plate

inoculation.

2. The disc diffusion test procedure steps, as described for nonfastidious bacteria,

should be followed. No more than 9 antimicrobial discs should be placed onto the

agar surface of a 150-mm agar plate not more than 4 discs onto a 100-mm plate.

However, when testing some agents (e.g., quinolones) which produce extremely

large zones, fewer discs may need to be tested per plate.

3. The plates are incubated at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 for 20 to 24 hours

before measuring the zones of inhibition.

Zone Diameter Interpretive Criteria

The antimicrobial agents suggested for routine testing of N. gonorrhoeae are indicated in

Annexure I. Each zone size is interpreted by reference to the Table 2F (Zone Diameter

Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory Concentration Breakpoints

for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial

Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement as susceptible, intermediate

506

Page 507: Testing 500 pages

and resistant. Disc diffusion testing of N. gonorrhoeae with other agents is not

recommended.

NOTE: Organisms with 10-g penicillin disc zone diameters of < 19 mm generally produce

ß-lactamase. However, ß-lactamase tests are faster and are therefore preferred for

recognition of this plasmid-mediated resistance. Organisms with plasmid-mediated

resistance to tetracycline also have zones of inhibition (30-g tetracycline discs) of < 19

mm. Chromosomal mechanisms of resistance to penicillin and tetracycline produce larger

zone diameters, which can be accurately recognized using the interpretive criteria indicated

in Table 2F (Zone Diameter Interpretative Standards and equivalent Minimum Inhibitory

Concentration Breakpoints for N. gonorrhoeae) of the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance

Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement.

Determination of MIC for Fastidious organisms

The Agar dilution method

Standardization of inoculum.

The inoculum should be an actively growing culture diluted in saline to 104 to 105

microorganism per ml.

For S.pneumoniae – Direct colony suspension from a 12-15 hour culture from TSBA

medium is to be used. The colonies are suspended in 0.5ml of normal saline and the

opacity adjusted to McFarland 0.5. A 1/10 dilution of this suspension is made and within

15 minutes of making the diluted suspension the test plates should be inoculated with

either a platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml or multipoint inoculator.

For N.gonorrhoeae and H. influenzae- Similar to the procedure described above for

S.pneumoniae

Inoculation of test plate

In general the inoculum should be applied as a spot that covers a circle about 5-8mm in

diameter .A platinum loop calibrated to deliver 0.001ml of the inoculum is used to spot

507

Page 508: Testing 500 pages

inoculate the cultures. Appropriate ATCC quality control organism(s) should be included

alongwith each test. Inoculated plates are left undisturbed until the spots of inoculum

have dried.

Incubation

After the spots of inoculum have dried, the plates are incubated at 35oC for 16 to 18 h in

an inverted position in a 5% CO2 incubator. A candle extinction jar may be used if a

CO2 incubator is not available.

Reading

The control plate should show the growth of the QC test organism. The MIC of the

quality control strain should be in the expected quality control range. The end point is the

lowest concentration of antibiotic that completely inhibits growth. A barely visible

haziness or single colony should be disregarded. Results are reported as the MIC in

micrograms or units/ml. Interpretation is made in accordance to the guidelines laid down

in the NCCLS M100-S12: Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility

Testing: Twelfth Informational Supplement (MIC Interpretative Standards) as

susceptible, intermediate and resistant.

508

Page 509: Testing 500 pages

6.Errors in Interpretation and reporting results

In the interpretation of test results there are possibilities for errors to occur. Based on impact

of errors in treatment of patient they are classified as minor errors, major errors and very

major errors. This is achieved by comparing disk diffusion, which is widely used to report

with the MIC, which is reference method. The following flow chart shows the errors

inreporting.(adopted from Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th edition)

Resistant Minor Error Very Major Error

Minor Error Intermediate Minor Error

Major Error Minor Error Susceptible

Disk Diffusion Diameter (mm)

509

MIC (g/ml)

Page 510: Testing 500 pages

7. Quality Control in Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing

QC is performed to check the quality of medium, the potency of the antibiotic, to

check manual errors. Quality control strains should be included daily with the test. Not

more than 1 in 20 results should be outside accuracy limits. No zone should be more than 4

standard deviations away from midpoint between the stated limits.

If, for reasons of expense or manpower constraints, it is not possible to include all strains on

a daily basis, then the following guidelines should be followed.

The frequency can be decreased to once weekly if proficiency has been demonstrated by

33. Performing QC daily for 30 days with less than 10% inaccuracy for each drug

34. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new drug included in the testing

35. All documentation is maintained indefinitely

36. Proficiency testing is repeated for each new batch of media or reagents

All tests must be within accuracy limits if QC is done once weekly.

Reference strains for quality control

Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 (beta-lactamase negative)

Escherichia coli ATCC 35218 (beta-lactamase positive)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 25923 (beta-lactmase negative, oxacillin susceptible)

Staphylococccus aureus ATCC 38591 (beta-lactmase positive)

Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853 (for aminoglycosides)

Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212 (for checking of thymidine or thymine level of MHA)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49766 (for cephalosporins)

Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 10211 (for medium control)

Neissseria gonorrheae ATCC 49226

Stock cultures should be kept at -70C in Brucella broth with 10% glycerol for up to 3 years.

Before use as a QC strain, the strain should be subcultured at least twice and retested for

510

Page 511: Testing 500 pages

characteristic features. Working cultures are maintained on TSA slants at 2-8C for up to 2

weeks.

8. Standard Methods For The Detection Of Antibacterial Resistance.

Detection of Oxacillin/Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA)

Strains that are oxacillin and methicillin resistant, historically termed methicillin-resistant

S. aureus (MRSA), are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including cephalosporins and

carbapenems. MRSA isolates often are multiply resistant to commonly used antimicrobial

agents, including erythromycin, clindamycin, and tetracycline. Since 1996, reports of

MRSA strains with decreased susceptibility to vancomycin (minimum inhibitory

concentration [MIC], >8 g/ml) have been published.

Glycopeptides, vancomycin and Teicoplanin are the only drug of choice for treatment of

severe MRSA infections, although some strains remain susceptible to fluoroquinolones,

trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, gentamicin, or rifampin. Because of the rapid emergence of

rifampin resistance, this drug should never be used as a single agent to treat MRSA

infections.

The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) has recommended

"Screening Test for Oxacillin-resistant S. aureus” and uses an agar plate containing 6

microg/ml of oxacillin and Müeller-Hinton agar supplemented with NaCl (4% w/v; 0.68

mol/L). These plates can be stored refrigerated for up to 2 weeks.

The inoculum is prepared by matching a 0.5 McFarland tube. Two methods can be followed

for inoculation:

17. Dilute the supension 1:100, and inoculate 10 microL on the plate, to get an inoculum of

104 CFU.

18. Dip a swab in the suspension and express excess fluid by pressing swab against the wall

of the tube. Streak swab over a 1-1.5 inch area.

511

Page 512: Testing 500 pages

In both methods, any growth after 24 hours incubation at 35C denotes oxacillin resistance,

if controls are satisfactory.

Accurate detection of oxacillin/methicillin resistance can be difficult due to the presence of

two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) that may coexist within a

culture. All cells in a culture may carry the genetic information for resistance but only a

small number can express the resistance in vitro. This phenomenon is termed

heteroresistance and occurs in staphylococci resistant to penicillinase-stable penicillins, such

as oxacillin.

Heteroresistance is a problem for clinical laboratory personnel because cells expressing

resistance may grow more slowly than the susceptible population. This is why isolates being

tested against oxacillin, methicillin, or nafcillin should be incubated at 35 C for a full 24

hours before reading. The breakpoints for S. aureus are different from those for coagulase-

negative staphylococci (CoNS).

MICs Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus <2 g/ml no intermediate MIC MIC>4 g /ml

CoNS <0.25g /ml no intermediate MIC MIC>0.5 g /ml

Zone sizes Oxacillin Susceptible Oxacillin Intermediate Oxacillin Resistant

S. aureus >13 mm 11-12 mm <10 mm

CoNS >18 mm no intermediate zone <17 mm

512

Page 513: Testing 500 pages

When used correctly, broth-based and agar-based tests usually can detect MRSA. Oxacillin

screen plates can be used in addition to routine susceptibility test methods or as a back-up

method. Amplification tests like those based on the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detect

the mecA gene. These tests confirm oxacillin/methicillin resistance caused by mecA in

Staphylococcus species.

Detection of Oxacillin-resistant Coagulase-negative Staphylococcus sp.

Although there are about 20 CoNS species, they often are considered to be a single group.

Some species are more resistant to commonly used antimicrobial agents than others.

Identification to species level can aid in the recognition of outbreaks and in tracking

resistance trends. S. epidermidis is the most common CoNS isolated in clinical laboratories.

Usually, S. epidermidis, S. haemolyticus and S. hominis are more likely to be multiply

resistant to antimicrobial agents than are other CoNS species. However, resistance patterns

of CoNS may differ between hospitals and wards.

Oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates are resistant to all beta-lactam agents, including

penicillins, cephalosporins, and carbapenems. In addition, oxacillin-resistant CoNS isolates

are often resistant to other commonly used antimicrobial agents, so vancomycin is

frequently the drug of choice for treatment of clinically significant infections.

Accurate detection of oxacillin resistance can be difficult. Colony sizes of CoNS are often

smaller than those of S. aureus, making growth more difficult to read. In addition, like

S. aureus, two subpopulations (one susceptible and the other resistant) may coexist within a

culture. When studies were performed to evaluate oxacillin breakpoints for CoNS, the

current breakpoints for S. aureus failed to detect many CoNS that contained the mecA gene.

In general, the new breakpoints for CoNS correlate better with mecA production for CoNS.

513

Page 514: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Extended-Spectrum Beta-Lactamases (ESBLs)

ESBLs are enzymes that mediate resistance to extended-spectrum (third generation)

cephalosporins (e.g., ceftazidime, cefotaxime, and ceftriaxone) and monobactams (e.g.,

aztreonam) but do not affect cephamycins (e.g., cefoxitin and cefotetan) or carbapenems

(e.g., meropenem or imipenem). ESBLs can be difficult to detect because they have

different levels of activity against various cephalosporins. Thus, the choice of which

antimicrobial agents to test is critical. For example, one enzyme may actively hydrolyze

ceftazidime, resulting in ceftazidime minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) of 256

microg/ml, but have poor activity on cefotaxime, producing MICs of only 4 microg/ml. If an

ESBL is detected, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be reported as

resistant, even if in vitro test results indicate susceptibility.

There are standard broth microdilution and disc diffusion screening tests using selected

antimicrobial agents. Each K. pneumoniae, K. oxytoca, or Escherichia coli isolate should be

considered a potential ESBL-producer if the test results are as follows:

Disk diffusion MICs

cefpodoxime < 22 mm cefpodoxime > 2 g /ml

ceftazidime < 22 mm ceftazidime > 2 g /ml

aztreonam < 27 mm aztreonam > 2 g /ml

cefotaxime < 27 mm cefotaxime > 2 g /ml

ceftriaxone < 25 mm ceftriaxone > 2 g /ml

The sensitivity of screening for ESBLs in enteric organisms can vary depending on which

antimicrobial agents are tested. The use of more than one of the five antimicrobial agents

suggested for screening will improve the sensitivity of detection. Cefpodoxime and

ceftazidime show the highest sensitivity for ESBL detection.

Phenotypic confirmation of potential ESBL-producing isolates of K. pneumoniae, K.

oxytoca, or E. coli can be done by testing both cefotaxime and ceftazidime, alone and in

combination with clavulanic acid. Testing can be performed by the broth microdilution

method or by disk diffusion. For MIC testing, a decrease of > 3 doubling dilutions in an

514

Page 515: Testing 500 pages

MIC for either cefotaxime or ceftazidime tested in combination with 4 g /ml clavulanic

acid, versus its MIC when tested alone, confirms an ESBL-producing organism. For disc

diffusion testing, a > 5 mm increase in a zone diameter for either antimicrobial agent tested

in combination with clavulanic acid versus its zone when tested alone confirms an ESBL-

producing organism.

Discs can be made by adding 10 l of a 1000 g /ml stock solution of clavulanic acid to

cefotaxime and ceftazidime disks each day of testing. In future, commercial manufacturers

of antimicrobial discs may produce discs containing cefotaxime and ceftazidime with

clavulanic acid. Until commercial discs are available, SmithKline Beecham can provide

clinical laboratories with clavulanic acid powder for routine use.

K. pneumoniae ATCC 700603 (positive control) and E. coli ATCC 25922 (negative control)

should be used for quality control of ESBL tests.

Some organisms with ESBLs contain other beta-lactamases that can mask ESBL production

in the phenotypic test, resulting in a false-negative test. These beta-lactamases include

AmpCs and inhibitor-resistant TEMs (IRTs). Hyper-production of TEM and/or SHV beta-

lactamases in organisms with ESBLs also may cause false-negative phenotypic

confirmatory test results. Currently, detection of organisms with multiple beta-lactamases

that may interfere with the phenotypic confirmatory test can only be accomplished using

isoelectric focusing and DNA sequencing, methods that are not usually available in clinical

laboratories.

If an isolate is confirmed as an ESBL-producer by the NCCLS-recommended phenotypic

confirmatory test procedure, all penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam should be

reported as resistant. This list does not include the cephamycins (cefotetan and cefoxitin),

which should be reported according to their routine test results. If an isolate is not

confirmed as an ESBL-producer, current recommendations suggest reporting results as for

routine testing. Do not change interpretations of penicillins, cephalosporins, and aztreonam

for isolates not confirmed as ESBLs.

515

Page 516: Testing 500 pages

Other isolates of Enterobacteriaceae, such as Salmonella species and Proteus mirabilis, and

isolates of Pseudomonas aeruginosa also produce ESBLs. However, at this time, methods

for screening and phenotypic confirmatory testing of these isolates have not been

determined.

Detection of Imipenem or Meropenem Resistance in Gram-negative Organisms

Within a health care setting, increases in species-specific carbapenem resistance should be

monitored and sudden increases investigated to rule out an outbreak of resistant organisms

or spurious test results.

Published reports indicate some resistance in a variety of clinical Gram-negative organisms,

including Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Acinetobacter species, Proteus

species, Serratia marcescens, Enterobacter species, and K. pneumoniae. Stenotrophomonas

maltophilia isolates are intrinsically resistant to imipenem. Organisms can produce more

than one hydrolyzing enzyme and may show modifications in more than one porin,

producing high-level resistance to the carbapenems (minimum inhibitory concentration

[MIC] >16 g/ml). Organisms with decreased susceptibility produced by porin changes

alone often have lower MICs (2-8 microg/ml).

Organisms with MICs near interpretation breakpoints have greater potential for reporting

errors. For example, isolates of P. aeruginosa often have MICs that are at or near the

carbapenem intermediate (8 g/ml) and resistant (>16 g/ml) breakpoints. Some species,

such as P. mirabilis, P. vulgaris, and Morganella morganii, often have MICs (1-4 g/ml)

just below the carbapenem intermediate breakpoint of 8 mg/ml. Most other species of

Enterobacteriaceae are very susceptible (<0.5 g/ml).

Broth microdilution methods usually detect carbapenem resistance when the tests are

performed properly. However, studies have shown false resistance to imipenem in

commercially prepared test panels due to degradation of the drug or to a manufacturing

516

Page 517: Testing 500 pages

problem where concentrations of imipenem were too low. When performed properly, disc

diffusion and agar gradient diffusion also are acceptable methods for carbapenem testing.

Imipenem degrades easily. Studies suggest that meropenem may be more stable than

imipenem. However, for either antimicrobial agent, storage conditions of susceptibility

panels, cards, and discs must be monitored carefully and quality control results checked

frequently. If possible, store supplies containing carbapenems at the coldest temperature

range stated in the manufacturer's directions. An additional test method, such as agar

gradient diffusion (i.e., E test), can be used to verify intermediate or resistant results.

Quinolones and resistance

The number and location of mutations affecting critical sites determine the level of

resistance. Organisms may have alterations in more than one enzyme target site and, in

gram-negative organisms, may contain more than one porin change. Many resistant

organisms have multiple enzyme target site, porin, and efflux mutations, producing high-

level resistance to quinolones. In contrast, organisms with decreased susceptibility produced

only by porin changes usually have lower minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs).

The fluoroquinolone susceptibility profile for each clinical isolate is determined by the

number and location of mutational changes in specific enzyme target sites, porin proteins,

and efflux mechanisms. The effect of each mutation in an isolate is not equivalent for all

fluoroquinolones, due to variations of the chemical structures among this class of agents.

Therefore, an organism with one or more mutations may have resistant MICs/zone sizes to

one quinolone but have intermediate or susceptible MICs/zone sizes to another quinolone.

During therapy, the potential exists for an organism with a single mutation to acquire a

second mutation, leading to high-level resistance. After multiple mutations occur, an

organism is generally highly resistant to all quinolones.

Resistance to quinolones has been reported in a variety of important bacterial pathogens,

including E. coli, K. pneumoniae and other enteric organisms; P. aeruginosa; Chlamydia

517

Page 518: Testing 500 pages

trachomatis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae; Campylobacter jejuni, B. cepacia; S. maltophilia,

N. gonorrhoeae, S. aureus (especially oxacillin-resistant strains), Enterococcus faecium and

S. pneumoniae.

518

Page 519: Testing 500 pages

Detection of Resistant Enterococci

Penicillin/Ampicillin Resistance

Enterococci may be resistant to penicillin and ampicillin because of production of low-

affinity, penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) or, less commonly, because of the production of

ß-lactamase. The disc diffusion test can accurately detect isolates with altered PBPs, but it

will not reliably detect ß-lactamase producing strains. The rare ß-lactamase- producing

strains are detected best by using a direct, nitrocefin-based, ß-lactamase test. Certain

penicillin- ampicillin- resistant enterococci may possess high-level resistance (i.e., penicillin

MICs > 128 g/ml or ampicillin MICs > 64 g/ml). The disc test will not differentiate

those with normal resistance from this high-level resistance. For enterococci recovered

from blood and CSF, the laboratory should consider determining the actual MIC for

penicillin or ampicillin since E. faecium strains with normal lower level resistance

(penicillin MICs < 64 g/ml and ampicillin < 32 g/ml) should be considered potentially

susceptible to synergy with an aminoglycoside (in the absence of high-level aminoglycoside

resistance) whereas strains with higher level resistance may be resistant to such synergy.

Vancomycin Resistance

Accurate detection of vancomycin-resistant enterococci by the disc diffusion test requires

that plates be incubated for a full 24 hours (rather than 16 to 18 hours) and that any zone

surrounding the vancomycin disc be examined carefully with transmitted light for evidence

of small colonies or a light film growing within the zone. An intermediate category result

by the disc diffusion test should be verified by determining the vancomycin MIC.

High-level Aminoglycoside Resistance

High-level resistance to aminoglycosides is an indication that an enterococcal isolate will

not be affected synergistically by a combination of a penicillin or glycopeptide plus an

aminoglycoside. Special, high-content gentamicin (120 g) and streptomycin (300 g)

discs can be used to screen for this type of resistance. No zone of inhibition indicates

resistance, and zones of > 10 mm indicate a lack of high-level resistance. Strains that yield

519

Page 520: Testing 500 pages

zones of 7 to 9 mm should be examined using a dilution screen test. Other aminoglycosides

need not be tested, because their activities against enterococci are not superior to gentamicin

or streptomycin.

Aminoglycoside Resistance in Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Resistance to one aminoglycoside may not predict resistance to the others. In general,

resistance is relatively common in P. aeruginosa but less common in Enterobacteriaceae.

Enterobacteriaceae resistant to gentamicin and tobramycin can be susceptible to amikacin or

netilmicin because these drugs are not affected by many of the aminoglycoside modifying

enzymes (AMEs). Therefore, the prevalence of amikacin resistance can be lower than the

prevalence of resistance to gentamicin and tobramycin, depending upon the resistance

mechanisms present at a healthcare facility.

Aminoglycosides are not clinically effective against Salmonella species and Shigella

species, although they may appear susceptible, aminoglycosides should not be tested or

reported.

9. Application of Computers in Antibacterial Susceptibility Testing

Antimicrobial resistance is a global problem.

Emergence of multidrug resistance has limited the therapeutic options,

hence monitoring resistance is of paramount importance.

Antimicrobial resistance monitoring will help to review the current status of

antimicrobial resistance locally, nationally and globally and helpful in minimizing the

consequence of drug resistance, limit the emergence and spread of drug resistant

pathogens.

Thousands of laboratories are distributed world-wide and need to be linked to integrate

data on most clinically relevant organism on a daily basis to obtain an accurate picture of

“real resistance”. For this purpose a software was developed for the management of

routine laboratory results by WHO called ‘WHONET’. This software has focused on data

analysis particularly on the results of AST.

520

Page 521: Testing 500 pages

WHONET 5.1 is a data base software compatible with, Windows 95,

Windows 98,

Windows NT and later versions of Windows. Installation capacity of the software is

9.34 mb, this software is available in website

http://www.who.int/emc/WHONET/Instructions.html.

This programme is useful in supplying current guidelines, protocols to local laboratories,

in identifying the clusters of resistant isolates and emerging outbreaks. Use of WHONET

software may aid the local laboratory in networking efficiently with the national

reference laboratory, in developing guidelines for use of antimicrobial agents and review

the same periodically, in studying the effect of antimicrobial control programmes on

resistant bacteria, to network efficiently with international bodies such as WHO, NCCLS

etc. This is also used for research studies.

521

Page 522: Testing 500 pages

10. Bibliography

Doern G.V. Susceptibility tests of fastidious bacteria. Manual of Clinical

Microbiology, 6th edition, Murray P.R, Baron E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C,

Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology, Washington DC, 1995, P. 1342-

1349.

Ira R. Bacteriology, Standard Operative procedure manual for microbiology

laboratories, National Institute of Biologicals. 1995, P73-97

John D.T and James H.J Antimicrobial Susceptibility testing: General

Considerations. Manual of Clinical Microbiology 7th edition, Murray P.R, Baron

E.J, Pfaller M.A, Tenover F.C, Yolken R, American Society for Microbiology,

Washington DC, 1999, P. 1469-1473.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards

for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. 8th Informational Supplement. M100 S12.

National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 2002. Villanova, Pa.

Thrupp L.D. Susceptibility Testing of Antibiotic in Liquid Media. Antibiotics In

Laboratory Medcine 2nd Edition, Victor Lorian, Williams and Wilkins, Balitimore.

1986; P. 93-150.

Water worth P.M. Quantitative methods for bacterial sensitivity testing.

Laboratory methods in antimicrobial chemotherapy. Reeves D.S, Philips I,

Williams J.D, Wise R. Churchill Livingstone, Baltimore. 1978; P. 31-41.

Kramer J. and Kirshbaum A. Effect of paper on the performance assay in the

control of antibiotic sensitivity discs. Appl Microbiol 1961: 9; P. 334-336.

Rippere R.A. Effects of paper on the performance of antibiotic-impregnated discs.

J Pharma Sci 1978: 67; P. 367-371.

522

Page 523: Testing 500 pages

Lalitha M.K, .Manayani D.J, Priya L, Jesudason M.V , Thomas K, Steinhoff M.C.

E test as an alternative to conventional MIC determination for surveillance of

drug resistant S.pneumoniae. Indian J. Med Res. 1997: 106; P. 500-503.

Morley D.C. A simple method for testing the sensitivity of wound bacteria to

penicillin and sulphathiazole by use of impregnated blotting paper disc. J. Pathol

Bacteriol. 1945: 57; P. 379-382.

A guide to sensitivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British Society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy. J. Antimicrob

Chemothrap 1991; 27: Supplement D, P. 1-50.

523

Page 524: Testing 500 pages

Annexure I.

Guidelines For Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing.

Suggested Battery Of Antibiotics For Susceptibility Testing.

Staphylococcus sp.

Gram negative bacilli

Streptococcus(Enterococcus,Pneumococcus)

Haemophilus sp N. gonorrhoeae

Penicillin Ampicillin Penicillin Ampicillin PenicillinOxacillin Piperacillin Oxacillin Amoxycillin/

Clavulanic acid

Cefazolin

Cephalothin Cephalothin Ampicillin Cefuroxime CeftriaxoneGentamicin Cefotaxime Cefotaxime Cefotaxime ChloramphenicolNetilmicin Ceftazidime Erythromycin Tetracycline CiprofloxacinAmikacin Gentamicin Chloramphenicol ErythromycinChloramphenicol Netilmicin Tetracycline ChloramphenicolTetracycline Amikacin VancomycinErythromycin ChloramphenicolCo-trimoxazole TetracyclineClindamycin Co-trimoxazoleOfloxacin Nalidixic AcidRifampicin CiprofloxacinVancomycin OfloxacinTeicoplanin Nitrofurantoin

ImipenemMeropenem

Note:

The choice of antibiotic depends on the pattern exhibited locally.

The selection of antibiotics varies based on specimen and the isolates under consideration.

524

Page 525: Testing 500 pages

Annexure II.

Suggested Antibiotic Dilution Ranges For MIC Testing

ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT CONCENTRATION RANGE(µg/ml)Penicillin G 0.015-32Methicillin 0.003-64Naficillin/Oxacillin 0.003-64Ampicillin(Gram +ve) 0.15-32Ampicillin(Gram-ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin(Gram +ve) 0.015-32Cephalosporin I generation (Gram -ve) 0.13-256Cephalosporin II&III generation (Gram-ve) 0.03-64Cephalosporin III generation

(Pseudomonas sp.)

0.13-256

Vancomycin 0.015-16Amikacin 0.06-128Gentamicin/Tobramycin 0.03-64Erythromycin 0.015-32Clindamycin 0.015-32Rifampicin 0.015-32Chloramphenicol 0.06-256Tetracycline 0.06-256Trimethoprim 0.03-64Sulphamethoxazole 0.6-1216Trimethoprim(UTI,Gram - ve) 0.5-64Source-A guide to senstivity testing: Report of working party on antibiotic sensitivity

testing of the British society for Antimicrobial Chemotherapy.J.Antimicrob Chemotherap

1991;(27):Supplement D,1-50.

525

Page 526: Testing 500 pages

Annexure III.

Solvents and Diluents for Antibiotics

526

Page 527: Testing 500 pages

FootNote:

eee.Cephalosporins and cephems not listed above or in footnote d are solublized (un-

less the manufacturer indicates otherwise) in phosphate buffer, pH 6.0, 0.1 mol/L,

and further diluted in sterile distilled water.

fff. The diammonium salt of moxalactam is very stable, but it is almost pure R

isomer. Maxolactam for clinical use is a 1:1 mixture of R and S isomers.

Therefore, the salt is dissolved in 0.04 mol/L HCL and allowed to react for 1.5 to

2.0 hours to convert it to equal parts of both isomers.

ggg.Alternatively, nitrofurantoin is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide.

hhh.These solvents and diluents are for making stock solutions of antimicrobial

agents that require solvents other than water. They should be diluted further, as

necessary, in water or broth. The products known to be suitable for water solvents

and diluents are amikacin, azlocillin, carbencillin, cefaclor, cefemandole,

cefonicid, cefotaxime, cefoperazone, cefoxitin, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxzone,

ciprofloxacin, clindamycin, gatifloxacin (with stirring), gemifloxacin, gentamicin,

kanamycin, linezolid, mecillinam, meropenem, methicillin, metronidazole,

mezlocillin, minocyclin, moxifloxacin, nafcillin, netilmycin, oxacillin, penicillin,

piperacillin, quinupristin-dalfopristin, sparfloxacin, sulbactam, tazobactam,

teicoplanin, tetracyclines, tobramycin, trimethoprim (if lactate), trospectomycin

and vancomycin.

iii. Anhydrous sodium carbonate is used at a weight of exactly 10% of the ceftazidme

to be used. The sodium carbonate is dissolved in solution in most of the required

water. The antibiotic is dissolved in this sodium carbonate solution and water is

added to desired volume. The solution is to be used as soon as possible, but can be

stored up to six hours at not more than 25C.

527

Page 528: Testing 500 pages

jjj. These compounds are potentially toxic. Consult the material safety datasheets

(MSDS) available from the product manufacturer before using any of these

materials.

kkk.Use ½ volume of water, then add glacial acetic acid dropwise until dissolved not

to exceed 2.5l/ml.

Annexure III: Reproduced with permission, from NCCLS publication

M100-S12 Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Testing: Twelfth

Informational Supplement (ISBN 1-56238- 454 -6). Copies of the current

edition may be obtained from NCCLS, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400,

Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898, USA.

528

Page 529: Testing 500 pages

529

Page 530: Testing 500 pages

530

Page 531: Testing 500 pages

531

Page 532: Testing 500 pages

532

Page 533: Testing 500 pages

533

Page 534: Testing 500 pages

534

Page 535: Testing 500 pages

535

Page 536: Testing 500 pages

536

Page 537: Testing 500 pages

537

Page 538: Testing 500 pages

538

Page 539: Testing 500 pages

539

Page 540: Testing 500 pages

540

Page 541: Testing 500 pages

541

Page 542: Testing 500 pages

542